2012 Buick Enclave Owner Manual Mcdn.dealereprocess.com/cdn/servicemanuals/buick/2012-enclave.pdf · Buick Enclave Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (3,1) Introduction iii The names,

Black plate (1,1)Buick Enclave Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-41Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-40Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-32Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-37Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-58

Information Provided by:


2012 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1



Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo, BUICK,the BUICK Emblem, and ENCLAVEare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle either becausethey are options that you did notpurchase or due to changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner manual. Please refer to thepurchase documentation relatingto your specific vehicle to confirmeach of the features found onyour vehicle. For vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited”for Buick Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20906533 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.Information Provided by:


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could resultin property or vehicle damage.This would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.



Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

M : Windshield Washer Fluid



vi Introduction

2 NOTES



In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23



1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel



In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑13.

D. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

E. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

USB Port (Inside IP Storage).Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑38

F. Clock on page 5‑9.

G. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See the separatenavigation manual.

H. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

I. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

J. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.

K. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑20.

L. Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

M. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

N. Horn on page 5‑5.

O. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3.

P. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

Q. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

R. Console Shift Lever.See “Console Shift Lever”under Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑22.

S. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑6.

Traction Control System(TCS) Disable Button.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32.

Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped).See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9‑29.

Power Liftgate Button(If Equipped). See Liftgate onpage 2‑10.

T. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

U. Heated and VentilatedFront Seats on page 3‑8(If Equipped).

V. Passenger Air Bag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑31.



1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that mayor may not be on your specificvehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

To open or close the liftgate, pressand hold8 until the liftgatebegins to move.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.



In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

With this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter

at the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside, turn the

key toward the front or rearof the vehicle, or pressthe Q or K button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8.



1-6 In Brief

LiftgateTo open the liftgate the vehicle mustbe in P (Park). Press the touch padunder the liftgate handle. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate it.

. Press and hold8 onthe Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touch pad switch onthe outside liftgate handle.

For more information see Liftgate onpage 2‑10.

Windows

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑20.



In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatback Control

C. Lumbar Adjustment Control. Move the seat forward or

rearward by moving thecontrol (A) forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear ofthe control (A) up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the control (A) upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the control (B) forward orrearward. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑4.

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (C) to increase or decreaselumbar support. See LumbarAdjustment on page 3‑4.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and power steeringcolumn, if available.



1-8 In Brief

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the power steeringcolumn, if available.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑17and Steering Wheel Adjustmenton page 5‑2 for moreinformation.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release "1" or"2." The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seatand outside mirrors will move to theposition previously stored for theidentified driver.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑6and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41 for more information.

Easy Exit Positions

The easy exit feature can move thedriver seat rearward and the powersteering column, if available, up andforward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

S : Press to recall the easy exitpositions. The vehicle must be inP (Park).

See Memory Seats on page 3‑6and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41 for more information.

Second Row Seats

The second row seat can be foldedto access the third row. Pull thesliding seat lever forward; the seatcushion folds, and the seat slidesforward.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.



In Brief 1-9

Third Row SeatsThe third row seatbacks can befolded forward, and the seats canbe removed.

To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.

3. Pull up on the release lever onthe back of the seat.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

See Third Row Seats on page 3‑11for more information.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are on thecenter console. To operate, theengine must be running.

I: If available, press to heat theseatback only.

H : If available, press to cool theentire seat.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.



1-10 In Brief

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will changeto the next lower setting, and thento the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑8 for moreinformation.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑14.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑16.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑47.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensingsystem will turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleInformation Provided by:


In Brief 1-11

is started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑31 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select themirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

Interior Mirror

The automatic dimming rearviewmirror reduces the glare from othervehicle headlamps. Each time thevehicle is started, the dimmingfeature comes on.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑19.

Steering WheelAdjustment

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.



1-12 In Brief

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tilt andtelescope wheel, the control is onthe outboard side of the steeringcolumn.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

Push the control forward orrearward to move the steeringwheel toward the front or rearof the vehicle. To set thememory position, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

To manually turn them on, turn theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise to the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF: Press the top ofthe button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the domelamps are off. Press near the bottomof the button so the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.



In Brief 1-13

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑6.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel, to the leftof the steering wheel.

O : Turns the automatic lightcontrol on or off.

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

; : Manual operation of theparking lamps and other exteriorlamps.

5 : Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

# : Use to turn on or off the foglamps (if equipped).

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3.

. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipesor down for less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.



1-14 In Brief

Windshield Washer

J : Press the button at the endof the turn signal/lane changelever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z : Press to turn the rear wiper onand off. The wiper speed cannot bechanged.

Y : Press to spray washer fluid onthe rear window. The window wiperwill also come on.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 and Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 5‑6.

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Auto Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1. For moreinformation about the rear climatecontrol, see Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)



In Brief 1-15

on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio) on page 8‑8.

Transmission

Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever,to increase or decrease thegear range available.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑28.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.



1-16 In Brief

© or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display betweenthe radio station frequency and thetime, if equipped. While the ignitionis off, press 4 to display the time.

For more information aboutthese and other radio features,see Operation on page 7‑2.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System andRear Seat Audio (RSA) System,see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑40 and RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7‑50 for more information.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAVto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.

Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,then press O to turn theradio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑9.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ satelliteradio tuner and a valid XM satelliteradio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑9.



In Brief 1-17

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in theinstrument panel storage area.External devices such as iPods™,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, USB storage devices,etc. can be connected to theauxiliary port using a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) input jack or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑38.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑52.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w andc /x : Press toselect preset or favorite radiostations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® orUSB device.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press andhold for longer than two secondsto interact with those systems.See Bluetooth on page 7‑52 andOnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

c /x : Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.



1-18 In Brief

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio, CD, and for equippedvehicles, DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one secondto initiate voice recognition.See “Voice Recognition” in thenavigation manual for moreinformation.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM, or XM™.

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

+ e and − e : Press to increase orto decrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

Cruise Control

T : Press to turn cruise controlon and off. The indicator comes onwhen cruise control is on.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previouslyset speed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET– : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of pointsof interest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation system manualfor more information.



In Brief 1-19

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑37 for more information.

Storage Compartments

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, press thebuttons (B) or (C) to accessstorage areas.

Lift up on (A) for additionalstorage area.

See Floor Console Storage onpage 4‑3.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has 12‐volt accessorypower outlets which can be used toplug in electrical equipment, such asa cell phone or MP3 player.

The power outlets are located:. On the instrument panel below

the climate controls.. Inside the center floor console.. At the rear of the center floor

console.. In the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove thecover.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑10.



1-20 In Brief

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY to operatethe sunroof and power sunshade.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21.

The vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.

The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: Press the front or rear of theswitch to vent or close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, pressand release the rear or front ofthe switch to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

Manual Sunshade

The front sunshade must beopened and closed manually.To open the sunshade, press thebutton on the sunshade handleto release it and guide it back.To close the sunshade, pull thesunshade forward until it latches.

For more information see Sunroofon page 2‑22.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin,and the StabiliTrak system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and releaset located onthe instrument panel, and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑37.

. Press and releaset againto turn on the traction controlsystem. The StabiliTrak systemremains on.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑32.



In Brief 1-21

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑46.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑62 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑60.



1-22 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until “100%” is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.



In Brief 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0818

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for moreinformation.

Roadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar Advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.buickownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.



1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES



Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-18Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22



2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of the vehicle, callRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.




Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemSee Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5for additional information.




Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn soundswhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm thecontent theft‐deterrent system.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

K (Unlock): Press once tounlock only the driver door. If K ispressed again within five seconds,all remaining doors unlock.The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or untilthe ignition is turned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑14.

8 (Power Liftgate): Pressand hold until the liftgate begins tomove to open or close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening or closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The parking lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedlyfor 30 seconds. The alarm turnsoff when the ignition is moved toON/RUN orL is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lostor stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.




Any lost or stolen transmitterswill no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it.See your dealer to programtransmitters to this vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any ofthe circuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool

into the notch locatedalong the parting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter ifthe vehicle has remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.




Do not use the remote startfeature if the vehicle is low on fuel.The vehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

There are other conditions thatcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights cannot be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system will operateautomatically if the vehicle has theautomatic system, or at the samesetting as when the vehicle waslast turned off.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key is turnedto ON/RUN. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats on page 3‑8for more information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off when thekey is turned to ON/RUN.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a timeextension has been done.




Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run timeby 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1through 3 while the engine is stillrunning. The engine run time canonly be extended if it is the firstremote start since the vehicle hasbeen driven. Remote start can beextended one time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10-minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10-minute timeframe will start.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperaturegets too high or if the oil pressuregets low.




Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside, turn the key

toward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press the Q or Kbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.




Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41.

Automatic Door LocksVehicles with an automaticlock/unlock feature enable youto program the vehicle's powerdoor locks. This feature canbe programmed through theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41 for more information.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.




Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the doorto normal operation, turn the slotto the vertical position.

Doors

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

To unlock the liftgate, use thepower door lock switch or pressthe door unlock button on theRKE transmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.




To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad under the liftgate handle.The vehicle must be in P (Park)to open the liftgate. To close theliftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

The liftgate will not open if thebattery is disconnected or has lowvoltage. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, and theliftgate still will not function, thevehicle should be taken to a dealerfor service.

Power Liftgate Operation

The vehicle may have a powerliftgate. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgateis used.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make surethe area above and behind theliftgate is clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:. Press and hold the power liftgate

button on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.




Pressing the buttons or touchpada second time while the liftgate ismoving reverses the direction.

Power Liftgate Button nearLiftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed bypressing the power liftgate buttonnext to the liftgate latch. Press thebutton a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closedand latched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the lights will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate if thisoccurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition if the liftgate encounters anobstacle during a power open orclose cycle. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.

If the liftgate comes across moreobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates, andyou must manually open or closethe liftgate. A message displays,LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate thatthe liftgate is open. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for more information.




After removing the obstructions,manually open the liftgate to the fullopen position or close the liftgate tothe fully closed and latched position.The liftgate resumes normal poweroperation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor,the liftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually. Do not force theliftgate open or closed during apower cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch on thecenter console to the OFF position.A message displays, POWERLIFTGATE OFF, to indicate that theliftgate is manual operation mode.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑27 for more information.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually openedand closed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate,use the pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. The liftgate latch willpower close. Always close theliftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lights will flash three times,but the liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended thatyou drive with the liftgate open.However, if you must drive withthe liftgate open, the liftgate shouldbe set to manual operation bypressing the OFF switch on thecenter console.




Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemOn vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem, to activate the system:

. Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch whenany door is open.

The security light flashes.

When the door is closed,the security light stopsflashing and stays on solidfor approximately 30 seconds.

The content theft-deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

. Press Q when the driver dooris closed. The security lightcomes on solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft-deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter,a 10-second pre-alarm occurs.The horn chirps and the lights flash.

If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to STARTor the door is not unlocked bypressing Q during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm goes off.The headlamps flash and the hornsounds for about 30 seconds, thenturns off to save the battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the door

key after the doors are closed.. Unlock the door with the RKE

transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way sets off the alarm ifthe system has been armed.

Press K or place the key in theignition and turn it to START toturn off the alarm.




Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window, and openthe driver door.

2. Press Q.3. Get out of the vehicle, close the

door, and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound whenit should, but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑32.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, see yourdealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on ifthere is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start andthe security light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be a problemwith the theft-deterrent system.Turn the ignition off and try again.




If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and checkthe fuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑32 foradditional information. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key III+ to havea new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.




4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key III+ key is lostor damaged, see your dealer or alocksmith to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem Messages on page 5‑37for additional information.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select themirror.

2. Press on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.




Folding MirrorsFor vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

For vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors:

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This sound isnormal after a manual foldingoperation.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by theon and off setting on the insiderearview mirror. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑19 for more information.




Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This feature tiltsthe outside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or drivermirror returns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on oroff through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑38for more information.

If the vehicle has a RVC,the O button for turning thedimming feature on or off willnot be available.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.




Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path ofa closing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.




Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The power windowswork with the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP)is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑21.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edgeof the switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

A window with the express‐up/downfeature allows it to be raised orlowered without holding the switch.Press or pull the window switchfully and release it to activate theexpress feature. The express modecan be canceled by pressing orpulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN position, orwhen Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑21.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditionslike severe icing, the window willstop and open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.




Rear Window Lockout

The rear window lockout featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Presso to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LEDlight comes on when activated.

Presso again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor fromthe center mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY to operatethe sunroof and power sunshade.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21.

The vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.




The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of theswitch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear of the switch toexpress-open the sunroof. Pressand release the front of the switchto express-close the sunroof.

Manual Sunshade

The front sunshade must beopened and closed manually.To open the sunshade, press thebutton on the sunshade handleto release it and guide it back.To close the sunshade, pull thesunshade forward until it latches.

Do not keep the sunroof openfor long periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Dirt and debrismay collect on the sunroof seal orin the track. This could cause anissue with sunroof operation, noise,or plugging the water drainagesystem. Periodically open thesunroof and remove any obstaclesor loose debris. Wipe the sunroofseal and roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from thesunroof.




2 NOTES



Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57



3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants will suffera neck/spinal injury in a crash.Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the headrestraint, press the releasebutton, located on the headrestraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push thehead restraint down.

2. Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released tomake sure that it is locked inplace.




The vehicle's second‐row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's third‐row seats haveheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The vehicle's head restraints andheadrests are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

A. Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatback Control

C. Lumbar Adjustment Control. Move the seat forward or

rearward by moving thecontrol (A) forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear ofthe control (A) up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the control (A) upor down.

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the control (B) forward orrearward. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑4.

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (C) to increase or decreaselumbar support. See LumbarAdjustment on page 3‑4.




Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If available, move the handleforward or rearward to increaseor decrease lumbar support.

Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold thefront or rear of control to increaseor decrease lumbar support.Release the control when theseatback reaches the desiredlevel of lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

Power Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust theseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driverseat only when the vehicle isnot moving.




To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones.This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.




Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and power steeringcolumn, if available.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the power steeringcolumn, if available.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑17and Steering Wheel Adjustmenton page 5‑2 for moreinformation.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat, outside mirrors, andpower steering column, if available,will move to the positions previouslystored for the identified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpower steering column, if available,to stored positions when enteringthe vehicle.

To activate, unlock the driverdoor with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, and powersteering column will move to thememory positions associated withthe transmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Memory Seat Recall” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41 for more information.




To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, power mirror buttons, orthe power steering column control,if available.

If something has blocked thedriver seat and/or steering columnwhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe appropriate manual control forthe memory item that is not recallingfor two seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Positions

The easy exit feature can move thedriver seat rearward and the powersteering column, if available, up andforward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

S (Easy Exit Positions): Pressto recall the easy exit positions.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticdriver seat and power steeringcolumn movement occur whenthe ignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in) and the power steering

column, if available, moves up andforward. To move the seat backfarther, press the easy exit seatbutton again until the seat is allthe way back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealerfor service.

See “Easy Exit Seat” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41 formore information.




Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, suchas a blanket, cushion, cover,or similar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are onthe center console. To operate,the engine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): If available,press to heat the seatback only.

H (Cooled Seat): If available,press to cool the entire seat.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will changeto the next lower setting, and then

to the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger heated seat maytake longer to heat up.

The heated and/or cooled seatsare canceled after the ignition isturned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start.The heated seats will be canceledwhen the ignition is turned on.Press the desired heated seatbutton to use the heated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for more information.




Rear Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Handle

B. Reclining Seatback Strap

C. Sliding Seat Lever

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is lockedinto place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks onthe floor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward.See Center Console Storage onpage 4‑2.

3. Place the folding armrests in theupright position.




4. Make sure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushion willfold, and the entire seat will slideforward. The head restraints willfold out of the way automatically.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seat orin the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward untilit is locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback untilit is locked into place.

4. Return the head restraint to theupright position by reachingbehind the seat and pulling thehead restraint forward until itlocks into place.

Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure that itis locked.

5. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is locked inplace.

6. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

7. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pullthe reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the strap to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Folding the Seatback

To fold the second row seatbacks:


2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.

The head restraint will fold downautomatically.




To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the uppercorner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked. Pull up onthe head restraint to return it to theupright, locked position.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats,pull outward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forwardor rearward to the desired position.Release the handle, and push andpull on the seat to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second rowis folded, or pushed forward inthe entry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

Folding the Seatback


To fold the third row seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.




3. Pull up on the release lever onthe back of the seat.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. From the rear of the vehicle,raise the seatback to the uprightposition using the pullstrap onthe back of the third row seat,or lift the seatback and pushit into place from inside thevehicle.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

4. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.




Removing the Third Row Seats

To remove a third row seat:

1. Remove the cargomanagement system,if available and installed.See Cargo ManagementSystem on page 4‑4.



3. Fold the seatback down.See “Folding the Seatback”earlier in this section.

4. Remove the rear bolts on thefloor on each side of the seat.

5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and then pullingit out of the rear of the vehicle inone motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats

To reinstall a third row seat:

1. Before installing the seatthe seatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.

The seats must be placed inthe proper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seat hooksare on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is lockedin place.

4. Raise the seatback to theupright position. Push and pullon the seatback to make sure itis locked into place.

5. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.




Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑16 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!




When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children.And there are different rules forsmaller children and infants. If achild will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 3‑38or Infants and Young Children onpage 3‑41. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.




. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the beltlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you wouldbe less likely to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see “Returning the Seatto the Seating Position” underThird Row Seats on page 3‑11for instruction on reconnectingthe safety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.




2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑22.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulderbelt height adjuster, move it tothe height that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjuster” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight,pull up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullthe stitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.




To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way.If a door is slammed against asafety belt, damage can occur toboth the safety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder but not falling off of it.The belt should be close to butnot contacting the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑15.

To move it down, push down onthe release button (A) and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition. You can move the heightadjuster up by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.




Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal, near frontal, or rear crashif the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, for vehicles with side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety beltsin a side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once.If the pretensioners activate in acrash, they will need to be replaced,and probably other new partsfor the vehicle's safety belt system.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑23.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, theyare available through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the shoulder beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

Outboard Positions

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide whichis located in a storage pocket,at the top of the seat, underthe headrest on the driver'sside of the vehicle.




To access the comfort guide,you will first need to move theheadrest forward by pulling onthe handle behind the seatback.The comfort guide will now beaccessible.

Third Row Center Position

Pull the comfort guide out ofits storage location and thenreturn the headrest to its uprightposition.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt isnot twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top.




{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage locationor on its storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.




The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are all workingproperly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑22.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.




Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and thirdrow passengers seated directlybehind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger andthe second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.




All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for thefront outboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is onthe side of the seatback closestto the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force ofan inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injuredor killed in a crash if you arenot wearing your safety belt,even with airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑27.

Wearing your safety belt duringa crash helps reduce the chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blinkof an eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean onor sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.




{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly inthe vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 3‑38 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑41.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.




The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceilingabove the side windows.




{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the pathof an inflating roof-rail airbagwill be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal crashesto help reduce the potential forsevere injuries, mainly to the driver'sor front outboard passenger'shead and chest. However, theyare only designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds dependingon whether the vehicle hits anobject straight on or at an angle,and whether the object is fixedor moving, rigid or deformable,narrow or wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intendedto inflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.




The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑23.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to inflate

on the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willinflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, or the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicleis about to roll over on its side,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe vehicle damage or the repaircosts. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehiclehits, the angle of the impact, andhow quickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined bythe direction of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑25.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of thevehicle.




Airbags supplement theprotection provided by safetybelts by distributing the forceof the impact more evenlyover the occupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positionsin the first, second and third rows.The rollover capable roof-railairbags are designed to help reducethe risk of full or partial ejection inrollover events, although no systemcan prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑27 for moreinformation.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate,so quickly that some people maynot even realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location ofthe airbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑25.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.




You can lock the doors, and turnoff the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑21 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑21.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.




Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position.The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑18.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.




Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even thoughthe airbag is off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat asfar back as it will go. It is betterto secure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that

an infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and staylit as a reminder that the airbag isoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑18.

The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag tobe enabled, the on indicator willlight and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbag is active.




For some children, includingchildren in child restraints,and for very small adults, thepassenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑55 or SecuringChild Restraints (Right FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑57.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.




If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is notsitting properly in the seat.

Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters,and seat massagers can affecthow well the passengersensing system operates.




We recommend that you not useseat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approvedby GM for your specific vehicle.See Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36 for more informationabout modifications that canaffect how the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens,the off indicator will be lit, andthe airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not installa child restraint or allow anyoneto occupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17for important safety information.

The on indicator may be lit ifan object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.




Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑18.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.




Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of thefront outboard passenger seat.The passenger sensing system maynot operate properly if the originalseat trim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under oron top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operationof the passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑31.

If the vehicle has roof‐rail airbags,see Different Size Tires and Wheelson page 10‑56 for additionalinformation.

If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑17 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑25. See your dealerfor service.




Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on when you are driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.




The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑16 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑16.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.




{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle andnever allow children to playwith the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.




{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far backas it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in fourbasic types. Selection of aparticular restraint should takeinto consideration not only thechild's weight, height, and agebut also whether or not therestraint will be compatiblewith the motor vehicle inwhich it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.




{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries duringa crash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.




(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit ofthe vehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured invehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.




See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑47 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.




A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No one

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

can guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑31 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access toor interferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.




Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors foreach LATCH seating position thatwill accommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).




Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchorsthe top of the child restraint tothe vehicle. A top tether anchor isbuilt into the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — Bucket

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.




Second Row — 60/40 Bench


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Third Row


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover,if equipped, or near the anchor.

The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatbackfor each seating position in thesecond row.




Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

Some vehicles have top tetheranchors with a cover. Open thecover to access the anchors.

Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

Some vehicles have exposed toptether anchors.

Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Third Row

The third row has one top tetheranchor located at the bottom rear ofthe center seatback. This anchorshould be used for the centerseating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.




Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑45 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.




{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them.Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rearseat with a safety belt buckled.This could damage the safetybelt or the seat. Unbuckle andreturn the safety belt to itsstowed position, before foldingthe seat.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Recline the seatback to thefull reclined position.

Make sure the secondrow bench seatbacks arealigned at the same anglebefore placing the childrestraint on the seat. Makesure the third row benchseatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the childrestraint on the seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.




2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. If the anchor is covered, flipopen the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.




If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly aftera crash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.




Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, studythe instructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑47 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑45.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.






4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the shoulder belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked,repeat Steps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑47 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.




Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat)The vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑45.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑31 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑18 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑31 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑47for top tether anchor locations.




Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑18.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.




6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not lockedrepeat Steps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑31 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.




2 NOTES



Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

This vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area (A). To openthe cover, press the button.

The vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lowerright side of the faceplate and forvehicles with a USB port, it is

located in the instrument panelstorage. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑38 for more information.

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle to open it.Use the key to lock and unlock theglove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in frontof the center console. There maybe cupholders located in the secondrow seat armrest. To access,pull the armrest down. There areadditional cupholders located oneach side of the third row seatand in each door. There may becupholders located at the rear ofthe center console. To access,pull the handle down.



4-2 Storage

Armrest Storage

Vehicles with a rear seat armresthave two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down to access thecupholders.

Center Console Storage

Pull up on the lever, located on thefront of the center console armrest,to slide it forward and backward.To open the armrest storage area,press the button located on thefront of the armrest.

There is additional storage underthe armrest. Move the armrest allthe way to the rear position thenslide the storage cover back toaccess.



Storage 4-3

Floor Console Storage

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) and liftup. To access the lower storagearea, press the lower button (C) andlift up. The top of the console canbe folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on the handleon the rear of the console (A) andpull forward.

{ WARNING

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.



4-4 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, itcan be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. To install thecover, place the loops on eachcorner of the cover on the fourhooks in the rear of the vehicle.The cover should be storedsecurely when not in use.

Cargo Tie-DownsFour cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system locatedin the rear.

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover leftin the open position, could bethrown about the vehicle duringa crash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured.Be sure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside of thevehicle.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a conveniencenet in the rear, use it to store smallloads as far forward as possible.The net should not be used to storeheavy loads.



Storage 4-5

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.



4-6 Storage

2 NOTES



Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-23StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-24Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37



5-2 Instruments and Controls

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-40Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-41

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-49Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tilt andtelescope wheel, the control is onthe outboard side of the steeringcolumn.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

Push the control forward orrearward to move the steeringwheel toward the front or rear of thevehicle. To set the memory position,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.




Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w andc /x (Next/Previous):Press to select preset or favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® orUSB device.

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

. Press and releasew andc /x to go to the next orprevious radio station storedas a preset or favorite.

To select tracks on a CD/DVD(if equipped):

Press and releasew andc /xto go to the next or previous track.

To select tracks on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles withouta navigation system:

1. Press and holdw andc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew andc /x to scroll up or downthe list, then press and hold ,or press to play the highlightedtrack.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and holdw andc /xwhile listening to a song listed inthe main audio page, to quicklymove forward or in reversethrough the tracks. See theseparate navigation manualfor more information.

Track information is displayedon the screen. Releasew andc /x when the desired trackis reached.

2. Press and releasew andc /x to begin playing thetrack shown in the display.




To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and holdw andc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew andc /x to go back to theprevious folder list.

3. Press and releasew andc /x to scroll up or downthe list. To select a folder,

press and holdw, or

press ¨ when the folderis highlighted.

. To go back further inthe folder list, pressand holdc /x.

To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles with anavigation system:

1. Go to the Music Navigator byfirst touching the center touchscreen folder button in the mainaudio page.

2. While in Music Navigator, selectthe folder/artist/genre/category,etc. using the touch screen.

3. Press and releasec /x toscroll through the selected musiclist. Touch the track label on thetouch screen to highlight andbegin playing the track fromthat list.

4. Press and holdc /x toquickly scroll through theselected music list.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press andhold for longer than two secondsto interact with those systems.See Bluetooth on page 7‑52 andOnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

c /x (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio, CD, and forequipped vehicles, DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.




For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one secondto initiate voice recognition.See “Voice Recognition” in thenavigation manual for moreinformation.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CDor DVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beepis heard to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,press and hold to quickly moveforward through the tracks.Release to stop on the desiredtrack.

+ e and − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheelpad to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Use for a single wipingcycle.




9 (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Delays wiping cycle. Turn the bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑27.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton at the end of the turnsignal/lane change lever, to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.The wipers clear the windshield andeither stop or return to the presetspeed. The ignition key must be inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN forthis to work. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID is displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid Messages on page 5‑40.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spraywasher fluid on the rear window.The window wiper will also comeon. Release the button whenenough fluid has been sprayedon the window. The rear wiper willrun a few more cycles after it isreleased. If the rear wiper functionwas already on prior to pressingthe wash button, it stays on untilthe wiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑22.




CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 formore information about the DIC.

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealerwill set the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving toa new state or province, it willbe necessary to compensate forcompass variance by resettingthe zone through the DIC if thezone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zonein which the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance,use the following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicleis in P (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.




3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil the vehicle heading,for example, N for North,is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as anopen parking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or otherindustrial structures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass shouldbe calibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may bea strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CBor cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.




3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

ClockTo adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,then press O to turn theradio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labelsto be changed.

4. To increase the time or date,do one of the following:. Press the pushbutton below

the selected label.

. Press ¨ SEEK.

. Press\ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date,do one of the following:

. Press © SEEK.

. Presss REV.

. Turn f counterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then thepushbutton located under theforward arrow that displays onthe radio screen until the time12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month andday) and DD/MM (day andmonth) display.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.




Power OutletsThe vehicle has 12‐volt outlets thatcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phoneor MP3 player.

The power outlets are located onthe instrument panel below theclimate controls, inside the centerfloor console, at the rear of thecenter console, and in the rearcargo area. Lift the cover to accessthe outlet and replace when notin use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may notbe compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑58.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.




Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plugit back in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑21. The power restartswhen equipment using 150 wattsor less is plugged into the outletand a system fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high

initial peak wattage suchas: compressor-drivenrefrigerators and electricpower tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touchsensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring on page 10‑31.




Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gaugescould prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.




Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar




SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.




When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW messageappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑35.

Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. Under normaldriving conditions the gaugewill read 100°C (210°F) or less.If the gauge pointer is near 125°C(260°F), the engine is too hot.

It means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.




Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running,but the ignition is on, this gaugeshows the battery's state of chargein DC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle'scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.

This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/orthe charging system light comes on.See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑32 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone can indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.




Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn offthe reminder light and/or chime,remove the object from the seator buckle the safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑23.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.




Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑31for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to startthe vehicle, you may not see thesystem check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or eitherthe on or off symbol to let you knowthe status of the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagis allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.




If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comeson briefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light ison could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.




MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑18 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicatesthat there is an OBD II problemand service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause thislight to come on. Modificationsto these systems could lead to

costly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.




If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service mightbe required.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑46. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turnthe light off.

. Check that good quality fuelis used. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to runas efficiently as designed andmay cause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑44.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.




The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON/RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.

This light may also come on dueto low brake fluid. See Brakes onpage 10‑23 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake isfully released. The pedal maybe harder to push or, the pedalmay go closer to the floor.




It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing theVehicle on page 10‑83.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

The brake message remains onuntil any DIC button is pressed.The brake light remains on until theproblem is fixed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑32 for moreinformation.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comeson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while driving, the

vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, there are still brakes, but noantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,there are no antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regularbrakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when theTow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑29.




StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light goes off.

If it stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.

This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32 for more information.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe vehicle is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stayson while driving, the vehicle mayhave a problem with the coolingsystem. Stop and turn off thevehicle to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime soundswhen this light is on.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑45 for more information.




When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may bea problem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, thelight will come on at every ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑48 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off. If it doesnot come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off.




The light will flash rapidly if thealarm system is arming and one ormore of the monitored entry pointsis not closed. The light will stay onif the alarm is arming and all entrypoints are closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.




Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottomline of the display. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑26 formore information.

The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outsideair temperature automaticallyappears in the top right corner of theDIC display. If there is a problemwith the system that controls thetemperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If thisoccurs, have the vehicle serviced.The compass will be shown inthe bottom right corner of the DICdisplay. See Compass on page 5‑7for more information.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41for more information.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Pressthis button to customize thefeature settings on your vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41 for more information.




T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press thisbutton to display the odometer,trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system

will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle informationbutton until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the systemto be turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off.See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑36 andUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑37 for more information.




UNITS

Press the vehicle informationbutton until UNITS displays.This display allows you to selectbetween English or metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRICunits. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unitof measurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),the pressure for each tire canbe viewed in the DIC. The tirepressure will be shown in eitherkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi). Press the vehicleinformation button until the DICdisplays FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI)LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press thevehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REARTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure conditionis detected by the system whiledriving, a message advising youadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑38 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See Compass on page 5‑7 formore information.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See Compass on page 5‑7 formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIPA and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi)since the last reset for each tripodometer. Both trip odometerscan be used at the same time.




Each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressing theset/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled retroactive reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 mi) before it is startedagain, and then the retroactive resetfeature is activated, the display willshow 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle

begins moving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km(5.2 mi), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivenduring the last ignition cycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.

For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway,the number may change eventhough the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces betterfuel economy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG ECONOMY displays.This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is calculatedbased on the number of L/100 km(mpg) recorded since the last timethis menu item was reset. To resetAVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button.




TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be countedas long as the ignition is on, evenif another display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, pressand hold the set/reset button whileFUEL USED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG SPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated basedon the various vehicle speedsrecorded since the last reset of thisvalue. To reset the value to zero,press and hold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttons on theinstrument panel to acknowledgethat you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they canbe cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages willonly make the messages disappear,not correct the problem.




The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be ableto notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the batteryto recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, thecharging system light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light onpage 5‑19. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message

on the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TOXXX

This message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the driver door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.




HOOD OPEN

On some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

POWER LIFTGATE OFF

This message displays when thepower liftgate has been turned offby pressing the power liftgate buttonon the center console.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑15. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. Whenthe coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. Youcan continue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.




ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑15.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑20 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑10 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑8 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑2 formore information.




OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not drive thevehicle until the cause of thelow oil pressure is corrected.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑8.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and achime sounds when the coolingsystem temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters theengine coolant protection mode.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's abilityto accelerate. If this messageis on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performancemay be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehiclemay be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and achime sounds if the fuel level islow. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gauge on page 5‑14and Fuel on page 9‑44 for moreinformation.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light onthe instrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑20. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑46. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.




Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to theoff position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST (Assist)BLOCKED SEE OWNERSMANUAL

This message displays if thereis something interfering with thepark assist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑37 formore information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.For more information see UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑37.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑37 for more information.See your dealer for service.




Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if thereis a problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑32 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS)is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑32 for moreinformation. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑32 for more information.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑17and Airbag System on page 3‑23for more information.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑15 for moreinformation.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if thecontent theft-deterrent system hasdetected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14 for more information.




Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that controlthe air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if younotice a drop in heating andair conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays whena problem is detected with thepower steering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when yourvehicle's throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

Tire Messages

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

This message also displaysLEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑24.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal tothe values shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑38, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset buttonor the trip odometer reset stem.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.




SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part onthe TPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑24.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑48 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem withthe TPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑52, Tire Pressure Monitor

System on page 10‑45, and TirePressure on page 10‑45 for moreinformation.

Transmission Messages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, whenthe Antilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or when therear differential fluid is overheating.This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warningmessage is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stayson, see your dealer right away.See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑29for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith this system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle after 30 seconds and checkfor the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed orappears again when you begindriving, the AWD system needsservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.




TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty. Do notdrive the vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperaturewarning is displayed.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays whenthe outside air temperature iscold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)

This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h(80 mph) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22 for more information.




VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can onlybe programmed to one settingon the vehicle and cannot beprogrammed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customizationbutton to enter the featuresettings menu. If the menuis not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE INPARK will display. Beforeentering the menu, makesure the vehicle is in P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization buttonuntil the DISPLAY LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.




NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).






REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.




LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily override

delayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or thelock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑9 for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you wantthe exterior lamps to remain onwhen it is dark enough outside.This happens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.






APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during lowlight periods after unlocking thevehicle using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3for more information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/reset

button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stayat the last known setting.





PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select whetheror not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑19for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver'soutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger's outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's andpassenger's outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑6 for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat will moveback when the key is removedfrom the ignition. The steeringcolumn will also move up andforward on vehicles with the powertilt and telescopic steering feature.See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 for more information.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place priorto removing the key again.






MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑6 for more information.

Press the customization buttonuntil MEMORY SEAT RECALLappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat and outsidemirrors will automatically move tothe stored driving position whenthe unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris pressed. The steering columnwill also move on vehicles with thepower tilt and telescopic steering

feature. See Steering WheelAdjustment on page 5‑2 for moreinformation. See “Memory RemoteRecall” under Memory Seats onpage 3‑6 for more information onmatching transmitters to driverpositions.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.






FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be setto their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization buttonuntil FEATURE SETTINGSPRESS V TO EXIT appears in theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning ofthe feature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttonsare pressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.




Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to programthe Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved,it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming.It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal HomeRemote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section.

When programming a garagedoor, park outside of the garage.Park directly in line with and facingthe garage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmissionof the radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515or go to www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions,so read the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.




To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle,press and hold down the twooutside buttons at the sametime, releasing only whenthe Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied bythe manufacturer of yourgarage door opener receiver(motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button.Do not release the UniversalHome Remote button or thehand-held transmitter buttonuntil Step 4 has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 withthe procedure noted in“Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.




5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is completeand the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicatorlight blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and thenturns to a constantlight, continue with theprogramming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3to control the garage door,for two seconds, and thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1,as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.




Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming agate operator or garage dooropener by using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and releaseevery two seconds (cycle) thehand-held transmitter buttonuntil the frequency signal hasbeen successfully acceptedby the Universal Home Remote.

The Universal Home Remoteindicator light will flash slowly atfirst and then rapidly. Proceedwith Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” tocomplete the training procedure.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for atleast half of a second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.




Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote buttons, repeatthe programming instructions earlierin this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑5 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑6.




2 NOTES



Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.



6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps (If equipped)

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

# (Fog Lamps): Turns on the foglamps (if equipped).

See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.



Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal tothe vehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or inthe low‐beam position, pull theturn signal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come onat a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel and clusterwill also not be lit.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.



6-4 Lighting

Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around the vehicle.This feature is activated whenthe headlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps controlfeature, and when the ignition isturned off. The headlamps remainon until the exterior lamps control ismoved to the parking lamps positionor until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamp control in the parkinglamps or headlamps position, thedelayed headlamps cycle will notoccur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑41.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)Vehicles with the AdaptiveForward Lighting System (AFL)have headlamps that swivel to theleft or right when making a turn toprovide better lighting. To enableAFL, set the exterior lamp switchto the AUTO position. Move theswitch out of the AUTO position toturn off the system. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

AFL operates when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL does not operatewhen the transmission is inR (Reverse). AFL is not immediatelyoperable after starting the vehicle;driving a short distance is requiredto calibrate the AFL.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel below the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.



Lighting 6-5

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑32.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals is lefton and the vehicle has been drivenmore than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimewill sound.

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps button is on theexterior lamps control to the leftof the steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exteriorlamps button to turn the fog lampson or off. A light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster when thefog lamps are in use. The ignitionmust be on for the fog lampsto work.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps turn off.The fog lamps come back on againwhen the high-beam headlamps areturned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.



6-6 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The instrument panel brightnessknob is located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Push the knobin all the way until it extends outand then turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to brighten ordim the lights. Push the knob backin when finished.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened.The lamps can also be turnedon manually by fully turning theinstrument panel brightnesscontrol clockwise.

The reading lamps, located onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror, can be turned on or offindependently of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doorsare closed.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E DOME OFF (Dome LampOverride): Press the top of thebutton in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the domelamps are off. Press near the bottomof the button so the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.

Reading LampsPress the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.



Lighting 6-7

Lighting Features

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever " is pressed onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If " ispressed and no door is opened,the lamps turn off after about20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turnoff at the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceledif the ignition key is turned toON/RUN or the power door lockswitch is pressed. The lampswill dim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The doors are locked.. An illumination period of about

25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceledand the interior lamps remain on.

Delayed Exit LightingDelayed exit lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time after thekey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on untilone of the following occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The power door locks are

activated.. An illumination period of

20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remainon because a door is open.



6-8 Lighting

Parade DimmingThis feature automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrumentpanel displays in daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltage

display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produce allof the power needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads pluggedinto accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speedto generate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.



Lighting 6-9

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps or readinglamps are accidentally left on.If any of these lamps are left on,they automatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back onagain until one of the followingoccurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The exterior lamps control is

turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time out after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on while the ignition is onor off.



6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES



Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16MP3 (Radio with CD/USB) . . . 7-24MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-31Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

IntroductionInfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting ininjury or death to you or others.Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.



7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB Similar




Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD, DVD, and USB

Radios with CD, DVD, and USBhave a Bose® Surround SoundSystem. Some of the featuresare explained later in this sectionunder “Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade).”

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system,it has a CD, DVD, and USB radio.See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑40 for moreinformation on the RSE system.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.




Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System, pressand hold for more than two secondsto turn off the entire radio and RSEsystem and to start the parentalcontrol feature. Parental controlprevents the rear seat occupantfrom operating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used.The feature remains on until O ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.When the ignition is in the OFFposition, press 4 to display the time.For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA,or RDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XMstation; or CD, MP3, or WMA song.If information is available duringXM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback,the song title information displayson the top line of the display andartist information displays on thebottom line. When information isnot available, “NO INFO” displays.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features):If additional information isavailable for the current songbeing played, Auto Text willautomatically page/scroll theinformation every five secondsabove the FAV presets on theradio display.

To activate Auto Text:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the softkey under theAUTO TXT tab on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the softkey under theON tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everyfive seconds when Auto Textis activated.




Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV): The SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV)feature automatically adjusts theradio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise as the vehiclespeeds up or slows down, so thatthe volume level is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under theSpeed Compensated Volumesetting (OFF, Low, Med, orHigh) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.Press the softkey located belowthe BACK tab on the MENUSETUP display or let the displaytime out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehiclespeeds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained:

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD, ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey under the BASS,MID, or TREB tab for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds andthe level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press f for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.




EQ (Equalization): Press tochoose bass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. The choices are pop, rock,country, talk, jazz, and classical.Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained:

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD, ors REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thesoftkey under the BAL or FADE tabfor more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press f for more than two secondsuntil a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:. With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround

media, the left front andright front speakers faderearward, leaving the centerfront speakers unaffecteduntil the last fade step, thenall front speakers mute.

. With DVD‐V 5.1 Surroundmedia, surround sound ismaintained until Step 4 of theFade control is reached whilefading rearward. At that point theaudio system output changesto Stereo to prevent the lossof Center channel output whenthe full rearward fade positionis reached.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.




Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the TheftLock® system haslocked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK and ¨ SEEK : Press to goto the previous or next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press andhold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes tothe next station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.




Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmedas favorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of favoritespages.




Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. If XM Service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display“No Subscription Please Renew” onchannel XM1. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.comor 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK and ¨ SEEK : Press to goto the previous or next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press andhold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes tothe next station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until theXM frequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressings REV or\ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with thatcategory.




5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn f.

. Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on thedisplay.

. Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to displaythe favorites again.

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.To remove an undesired category,perform the following:


2. Press the softkey below theXM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category tobe removed.

4. Press the softkey under theRemove tab until the categoryname along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the softkeyunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe softkey under the RestoreAll tab.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmedas favorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.




The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of favoritespages.

XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked ata customer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, thesignal should return.

Loading XM: The audio systemis acquiring and processing audioand text data. No action is needed.This message should disappearshortly.




Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription PleaseRenew: XM subscriptionneeds to be reactivated.Contact XM at www.xmradio.comor 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S., and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.




Radio ReceptionFrequency interference andstatic can occur during normalradio reception if items suchas cell phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills can

interfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference can cause anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to theradio, unplug the cellular phoneand turn it off.




Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.This type of antenna is used withthe AM/FM radio, as well as OnStarand the XM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clearradio reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar. Make sure themulti-band antenna is notobstructed.

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT: Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The disc canbe removed. If the disc is notremoved, after several seconds,the disc automatically pullsback into the player.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press © togo to the start of the current track,if more than 10 seconds on the CDhave played. Press ¨ SEEK to go tothe next track.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.




RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player,

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber display.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD; itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.




Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD/USB) on page 7‑24 or MP3(Radio with CD/DVD) on page 7‑31.

CD Messages

Check Disc: Radios with a singleCD player display Check Disc and/or eject the CD if an error occurs.

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

CD/DVD Player

Playing a CD (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD partway into theslot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and the CD shouldbegin playing. (Loading a discinto the system, depending onmedia type and format, rangesfrom five to 20 seconds for a CD,and up to 30 seconds for a DVDto begin playing.)

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhile a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑50 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks(the upper slot is the DVD deck andthe lower slot is the CD deck) arecompatible with most audio CDs,CD-Rs, CD-RWs, and MP3/WMAs.Information Provided by:



When a CD is inserted, the textlabel DVD or CD symbol displayson the left side of the radio display.As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The disc ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back intothe player.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press andholdZ DVD for more thanfive seconds to force the discto eject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© and SEEK ¨ SEEK: Press© SEEK to go to the start of thecurrent track if the track has playedmore than five seconds. If the trackhas played less than five seconds,the previous track will play.

Press ¨ SEEK to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing.The CD or DVD remains inside theradio for future listening or viewing.

DVD/CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber displays.




. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD/AUX button onlycycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No AuxInput Device.”

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD/AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑38or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑40 for moreinformation.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD; itcould get caught in the CD or DVDplayer. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a descriptionlabel is needed, try labeling thetop of the recorded CD with amarking pen.




The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see“CD Messages” later in thissection.

Radios with CD and DVDAudio Output

Only one audio source can beheard through the speakers at onetime. An audio source is definedas DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or RearAuxiliary Jack.

Press O to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM) bypressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX toselect the CD slot, DVD slot, frontor rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is pluggedinto the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack or the rear auxiliary jack, thefront seat passengers are able tolisten to playback from this sourcethrough the vehicle speakers.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑38or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑40 for moreinformation.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑50 formore information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD/USB) on page 7‑24 or MP3(Radio with CD/DVD) on page 7‑31.




CD Messages

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough.When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched,wet, or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedlyor if an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or bythe buttons on the radio faceplate.See “Remote Control” under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑40 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑50 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audioCDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW,DVD+R/RW media along withMP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message displays onthe video screen or the radio, see“DVD Display Error Messages”under Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 7‑40 and“DVD Radio Error Messages” inthis section for more information.




Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change tracks ona CD or DVD, to manually tune aradio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation earlier in this sectionspecific to the radio, CD, and theDVD. Also, see Clock on page 5‑9for information on setting the clockand date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return tothe start of the current track orchapter. Press © SEEK again to goto the previous track or chapter.This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):Press to go to the next trackor chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressto quickly reverse the DVD atfive times the normal speed.The radio displays the elapsed timewhile in fast reverse. To stop fastreversing, press again. This buttonmay not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright informationor the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressto fast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automaticallypulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed because ofan unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdfor more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

A rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control” under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑40 for more information.The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot.




r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing,

the system is in pause mode.. If the pause icon is showing,

the system is in playback mode.. If the DVD screen is off, press

the play button to turn thescreen on.

Some DVDs begin playingafter the previews have finished,although there could be a delayof up to 30 seconds. If the DVDdoes not begin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeyunder the play/pause icon displayedon the radio. If the DVD still doesnot play, refer to the on-screeninstructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys under the navigationarrows to navigate the cursorthrough the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection, press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

A rear seat passenger can navigatethe DVD-A menus and controlsthrough the remote control.See “Remote Control” underRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑40 for moreinformation. The Video Screen doesnot automatically power on whenthe DVD-A is inserted into the DVDslot. It must be manually turned onby the rear seat passenger throughthe remote control power button.




r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing,

the system is in pause mode.. If the pause icon is showing,

the system is in playback mode.

q Group r : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings onthe DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press tocycle through audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc.The video screen shows theaudio stream changing.

Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert thedisc, with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeledmedia. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do oneof the following:

. Press c on the remote control.

. Press the softkey under thestop or the play/pause iconsdisplayed on the radio.

. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX buttonto make DVD-V the activesource.

To resume DVD playback, do one ofthe following:

. Press r / j on the remotecontrol.

. Press the softkey under theplay/pause icon displayed onthe radio.




The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stopbutton has not been pressed twiceon the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

PressZ DVD on the radio to ejectthe disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short periodof time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD,the player begins to play again.If loading and reading a DVD orCD cannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdZ DVD for more than five secondsto force the disc to eject.

DVD Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are disc loador eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whenZ DVD or DVD/CD/AUX ispressed on the radio.

MP3 (Radio with CD/USB)

Format

Radios that have the capabilityof playing MP3s can play .mp3or .wma files that were recordedonto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or avariable bit rate.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files stored ona USB storage device as well asAAC files stored on an iPod.




Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3/WMA files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioplays both file formats in the orderin which they were recorded tothe disc.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 512 files and folders.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays on theradio as the CD label.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder under theroot directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks onthe disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.




Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track

in the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, the radio displays thefile name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or.pls file extension and are storedon a USB device may be supportedby the radio with a USB port.




Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on thedisc can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Discdisplays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sortthe files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing whileit is scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the artistdisplays.




To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songsfrom that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the instrument panelstorage area. See Instrument PanelStorage on page 4‑1 for moreinformation.

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in theinstrument panel storage area.If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio's display.The iPod music appears on theradio’s display and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power fromthe vehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑38 for moreinformation.Information Provided by:



Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod usingthe radio buttons and knobs anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release\ FWDto resume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track.The tab appears raised when pauseis being used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folderon the USB drive. To browseand select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.




4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the file to beplayed.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.


To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through

the list each time the softkey ispressed.


. Fourth softkey, 10% throughthe list each time the softkey ispressed.





Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks.The tab appears lowered whenRepeat All is being used. This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD)

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or.wma files recorded onto a CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

The USB port can play .mp3and .wma files that are stored ona USB storage device as well asAAC files stored on an iPod.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD Player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.




The CD Player reads bothuncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc. Uncompressed audiois played before MP3/WMA files.Press the CAT (category) buttonto toggle between uncompressedaudio and MP3/WMA files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD Player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.

The CD Player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma,

or .cda file extension.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder underthe root directory called CDaccesses all of the CD audiotracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.




No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder.The next and previous folderfunction does not function ona disc that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder.The folder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists.. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track

in the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder,the display does not automaticallyshow the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosenas the default display. The newtrack name displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename do not display.




Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists createdusing WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software canbe accessed; however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or.pls file extension and are storedon a USB device may be supportedby the radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3/WMA FileFrom a Disc (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate theCD (tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to thestart of the track, if more thanfive seconds have played. Press togo to the previous track if less thanfive seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.


s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on thedisc can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Discdisplays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.




The player scans the disc to sortthe files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing whileit is scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, thedisc begins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songsfrom that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the instrument panelstorage area. See Instrument PanelStorage on page 4‑1 for moreinformation.

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.




To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector, and connect the otherend to the USB port located in theinstrument panel storage area.If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio's display.The iPod music appears on theradio’s display and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off andwill not charge or draw powerfrom the vehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑38 for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod usingthe radio buttons and knobs anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release\ FWDto resume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.




j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track.The tab appears raised when pauseis being used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folderon the USB drive. To browseand select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.







h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.










Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Auxiliary DevicesThe vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack locatedon the lower right side of thefaceplate and for vehicles witha USB port, it is located in theinstrument panel storage area.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is located onthe lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do notplug a headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. Connect anauxiliary input device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD player, or cassette tape playerto the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged toset up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park).See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3for more information on driverdistraction.




To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber display.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD/AUX button onlycycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No AuxInput Device.”

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD/AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See Clock on page 5‑9 or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑40 for more information.

Using the USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port,the connector is located in theinstrument panel storage area.See Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 for more information.

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.See MP3 (Radio with CD/USB) onpage 7‑24 or MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on page 7‑31 for informationabout how to connect and control aUSB storage device or an iPod.




USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nano. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, a video displayscreen, audio/video jacks, twowireless headphones, and a remotecontrol. See Operation on page 7‑2for more information on the vehicle'sinfotainment system.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE systemmight or might not work until thetemperature is within the operatingrange. The operating range for theRSE system is above −20°C (−4°F)or below 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature of the vehicle isoutside of this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperature iswithin the operating range of theRSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may havea Parental Control feature,depending on the radio.To enable Parental Control,press and hold the radio powerbutton for more than two secondsto stop all system features suchas: radio, video screen, RSA, DVDand/or CD. While Parental Controlis on, Q displays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.




Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated toRSA selections. These headphonesare used to listen to media suchas CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs,DVD-As, radio, any auxiliary sourceconnected to A/V jacks, or theauxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Switch the headphones offwhen not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on,the batteries might need to be

replaced. Intermittent sound or staticon the headphones can also bean indication of weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

Infrared transmitters are locatedat the rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.




For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positionedon the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Headphones should be stored inthe front floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on theleft side of the headphones.Slide the battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly,using the diagram on the insideof the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.




Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

A. Yellow: Video Input

B. White: Left Audio Input

C. Red: Right Audio Input

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment.

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gameunit to the RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not supplied)might be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in theDVD player mode, pressing theAUX (auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screen

from the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑38 for more information.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu by using the remote control.To change a setting:

1. Pressz.

2. Usen,q, p,o andr tonavigate and use thesetup menu.

3. Pressz again to remove thesetup menu from the screen.




Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑50 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console. When the videoscreen is not in use, push it up intoits locked position.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.PressP on the remote control oreject the disc to turn off the screen.

The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.




Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe overhead console and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight orvery bright light could affect theability of the RSE transmitter toreceive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote controldoes not seem to be working, thebatteries might need to be replaced.

See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section. Objects blocking theline of sight could also affect thefunction of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O buttoncan be used to turn on the videoscreen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the videoscreen display. See Operation onpage 7‑2 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight automatically timesout after seven to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press to return theDVD to the main menu of theDVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection pressthe enter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.




n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to selectthe choice that is highlighted inany menu.

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return tothe beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while a DVDis playing to pause it. Press again tocontinue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing,depending on the radio, playmay be slowed down by pressings then[. The DVD continuesplaying in a slow play mode.Depending on the radio, performreverse slow play by pressingsthenr. To cancel slow play mode,

presss again.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous trackor chapter. This button might notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing

a DVD audio or CD, releaser.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, presss.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release[. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.




e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe system between the DVD playerand an auxiliary source.

2 (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs that havethis feature when a DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press this buttonbefore entering the number.

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses aToshiba® code set.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.




Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between theremote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.




Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer.




DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen might displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ EJECT button is pressed onthe radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobilefaxes, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemFor vehicles with Rear SeatAudio (RSA), rear seat passengerscan listen to and control any ofthe music sources: radio, CDs,DVDs, or other auxiliary sources.The rear seat passengers can onlycontrol the music sources the frontseat passengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controla CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driverlistens to the radio through thefront speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.




The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displaysX when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on the frontaudio system. Turn the iPod on,then choose the front auxiliaryinput with the RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or next station and staythere. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold © or ¨ until thedisplay flashes to tune to anindividual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than 10 seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.




When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to performa cursor up or down on the menu.Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor leftor right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to goto the next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CDor DVD changer, press PROG toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the systemcan interact with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact listwith the vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection for more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.




{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too longor too often at the screen ofthe phone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Takingyour eyes off the road too longor too often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone witha Hands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work withthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system.See www.gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levelsto a minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides theaudio system. Use the audiosystem volume knob, during acall, to change the volume level.The adjusted volume level remainsin memory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call, reject a call, or cancelan operation.




Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStarHands‐Free Calling, if equipped.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named“Your Vehicle” in the list onthe cell phone. Follow theinstructions on the cell phoneto enter the PIN that wasprovided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.




Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will storea phone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.




Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to storeall at once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”




Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.




Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when anothercall is active. The originalcall is placed on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,no action is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g,and then say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes afterthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”




Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call.You can use this feature whencalling a menu‐driven phonesystem. Account numbers canalso be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.




Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksand the DTS logos and Symbolare trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All RightsReserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories. Copyright1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories.All rights reserved.



Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear Climate Control System(Rear ClimateControl Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl



8-2 Climate Controls

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside airstill enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system willalso turn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected,the current temperature(s)selected and AUTO is shownon the display. The current airdelivery mode and fan speedalso appear for approximatelyfive seconds.

When AUTO is selected, theair conditioning and air inletare automatically controlled.The air conditioning runs whenthe outside temperature is over4°C (40°F). The system isautomatically set to outside air,unless it is hot outside andthen the air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help

quickly cool the vehicle.The recirculation indicatorlight will come on.

2. Set the temperature for thedriver and passenger.

To find a comfortable setting,start with a 22°C (73°F)temperature setting andallow about 20 minutes for thesystem to regulate. Use thedriver side or passenger sidetemperature buttons to adjustthe temperature setting asnecessary. The system willremain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not causethe vehicle to heat or cool morequickly.

To avoid blowing cold air incold weather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warmair is available. Press the fancontrol to override this delayand select the fan speed.




Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are usedto adjust the temperature ofthe air coming through thesystem. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system isturned off since outside air stillenters the vehicle, unless therecirculation mode is selected.See “Recirculation” later in thissection.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease the driverside temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show thetemperature setting.

Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease thepassenger side temperature.The passenger side display willshow the temperature setting.

PASS (Passenger): Press toset the passenger temperatureto match the driver temperaturesetting. The PASS indicator willturn off. When the passengertemperature setting is differentthan the driver setting, the PASSindicator comes on.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automaticcontrol places the fan speed undermanual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingstill displays, but the word AUTOno longer displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press H or G untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing a mode buttonwhile the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turning thesystem on. Press a mode buttonwhile in automatic control to placethe system into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneland floor outlets. Some air isdirected towards the windshieldand side window outlets. Coolerair is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.




6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 4°C (40°F). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents.

In this mode, outside air ispulled inside the vehicle.The air conditioning systemruns automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperatureis less than 4°C (40°F).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

While in defrost mode, if thePASS button is pressed, thePASS button indicator flashes threetimes to show that the passengerclimate control system cannotbe activated. If the passengertemperature buttons are adjustedwhile in defrost mode, the drivertemperature indicator will change.The passenger temperature willnot be displayed.

When returning to bi-level, vent,or floor mode, the previoustemperature settings displays inplace of any change made whilein defrost mode.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) onand off. An indicator light comeson when A/C is on.

The A/C does not work whenthe outside temperature is below4°C (40°F). If# is pressed theindicator flashes three times andturns off to show that the A/C modeis not available. If the A/C is onand the outside temperature dropsbelow a temperature which is toocool for air conditioning to beeffective, the A/C indicator turnsoff to show that the A/C modehas been canceled.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.




The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and mustbe re‐selected when the engineis turned on again.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selectedin these modes, the indicatorflashes three times and turns off.

The air conditioning compressoralso comes on when this mode isactivated. While in recirculationmode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp.To clear the fog, select eitherthe defog or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning onor off. See Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio) on page 8‑8.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on forabout 10 minutes, before turning off.

The defogger also turns off whenthe engine is turned off. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when the rear windowdefog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razorblade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defoggergrid lines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.




Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensorlocated on the instrument panel tothe right of the steering column,measures the temperature of theair inside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system usesthe information from these sensorsto maintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.




Rear Climate Control System (Rear ClimateControl Only)

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols. It comes on when any rearcontrol is adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to change theairflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets,as well as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.




Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. The system also turns on if anyof the rear controls, except C, arepressed. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

The system can also be turned off,by pressing and holding C.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of therear controls. It comes on whenany rear control is adjusted.

D andC (Fan Control): Press thefan up or down buttons to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control:Press + or − to increase ordecrease the air temperature.The temperature settings will displayin 0‐12 increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)setting.




N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

Air VentsUse the slider switch in the centerof the outlet, to change the directionof the airflow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof airflow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs whilein vent or bi-level modeswith mild temperature throughoutthe vehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.




Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air and inside air when inrecirculation mode.

To find out what type of replacementfilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

1. Open the glove box.2. Twist the compartment

retainers (A) and pull outwardto remove.

3. Lower the instrument panelcompartment assembly (B)beyond the stops.

4. If needed, unsnapthe instrument panelcompartment assembly (B)from the instrument panel.When reinstalling, be sure theinstrument panel compartmentdampener arm is alignedproperly to the dampenergear assembly.

5. Squeeze the housing cover (A)tabs to remove.

6. Remove the old air filter from thepassenger compartment air filterhousing (B).

7. Install the new air filter.

8. Replace the housing cover.

9. If removed, reinstall theinstrument panel compartmentassembly.

10. Reinstall the compartmentretainers.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.Information Provided by:


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-32

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-37Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-44Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-45Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58



9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enactedlaws regarding driver distraction.Become familiar with the locallaws in your area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do notread, take notes, or lookup information on phonesor other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, suchas programming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip informationinto any navigation deviceprior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment sectionfor more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing andusing a cell phone.




Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑14.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if youdrive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.




Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up,it can take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulicpower steering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑21.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speedsto make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds.See your dealer for service.




Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows youto turn 180 degrees withoutremoving a hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels candrop off the edge of a roadonto the shoulder while driving.Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so thatit straddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.




Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suitedto existing conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehicle

control can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changescould cause the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)




WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous.Water can build up under thevehicle's tires so they actuallyride on the water. This can happenif the road is wet enough and youare going fast enough. When thevehicle is hydroplaning, it has littleor no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑38.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.




Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowingdown and they could get so hot

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that they would not work well.You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Be alert on top of hills,something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.




Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there issnow or ice between the tiresand the road, creating less tractionor grip. Wet ice can occur at about0°C (32°F) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in even lesstraction. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads canbe treated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating too

quickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑30 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watchfor slippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.




Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust contains

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

carbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about5 cm (2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air insidethe vehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See “Climate Control System”in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.




To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engineruns faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do thisas little as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑59.




Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionor stability system. Shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑83.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to knowhow much weight your vehiclecan carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.




Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver's door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor lock post (striker). The tireand loading information labelshows the number of occupant

seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label alsoshows the size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑38 andTire Pressure on page 10‑45.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR)for the front and rear axle.See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.




4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacityfor your vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑54for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).




Example 2


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg(150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver's door.




The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Do not overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)




WARNING (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for the first805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshiftingto brake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stopsfor the first 322 km (200mi)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑49 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.




Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park),the ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑21.

This position locks the ignitionand transmission. The key canbe removed in LOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.




{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut off whiledriving, turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisis the position in which you canoperate the electrical accessoriesor items plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocksthe ignition and steering wheel.Use this position if the vehiclemust be pushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. This positioncan also be used for serviceand diagnostics, and to verify theproper operation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.The transmission is also unlocked inthis position. If you leave the key inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN

position with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will returnto ON/RUN for driving.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.




Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed willslow down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition keyis turned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is heldin START, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.

To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents crankingif the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto the ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all theway to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key inSTART for up to a maximumof 15 seconds. Wait at least

15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.




Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. Somemodels may have an internalthermostat in the cord which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperatures above0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It is routedaround the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it couldbe damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes or until adoor is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver dooris opened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work whenthe key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY positions.




Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑49.

1. Hold the brake pedal downand set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑31for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.




If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holdthe regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move theshift lever away from P (Park)without first pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery.




If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑79 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)




WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑22.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑49.




AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brakeand move the shift lever toP (Park). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑22. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑49.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply the

regular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shiftout of P (Park), ease pressure onthe shift lever, then push the shiftlever all the way into P (Park) asyou maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting outof Park on page 9‑23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.




N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speedis dangerous. Unless your footis firmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph)or more, push the acceleratorall the way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehicle

that way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,with your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll. This is normaland is due to the torque converterdesigned to improve fuel economyand performance. Use the brake tohold the vehicle on a hill. Do not usethe accelerator pedal.

L (Low): This position givesyou access to gear ranges.This provides more engine brakingbut lower fuel economy thanD (Drive). You can use it on verysteep hills, or in deep snow or mud.




Manual Mode

Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 for more information.The number displayed in theDIC is the highest gear that thetransmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed is toohigh. You have a brief period oftime to slow the vehicle. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, then pressthe − (Minus) button to the desiredlower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingis not available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the Tow/Haul mode can beused. See Tow/Haul Mode following.




Tow/Haul Mode_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under theclimate controls.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activatedthe Tow/Haul symbol will comeon the instrument panel cluster.See “Tow/Haul Mode” under DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑49 for more information.

Automatic Engine GradeBraking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speedby automatically implementinga shift schedule that uses theengine and the transmission toslow the vehicle. The system willautomatically command downshiftsto reduce vehicle speed, until thebrake pedal is no longer beingpressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driverto select a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑26.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact sparetire on an AWD vehicle, thesystem automatically detects thecompact spare and disables AWD.To restore AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on thesystem, replace the compact sparewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑78 for more information.




Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑23.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary to slamon the brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decrease

stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.




Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑49.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.




Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill StartAssist (HSA) feature, which may beuseful when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill ona grade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressureto ensure that there is no rolling.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction, and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicleand begin to drive away, thesystem performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are noproblems. The system may beheard or felt while it is working.This is normal and does not meanthere is a problem with the vehicle.The system should initialize beforethe vehicle reaches 32 km/h(20 mph). In some cases, it maytake approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, one of the followingmessages will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC):SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK, theStabiliTrak light will come onand stay and four chimes areheard. If these conditions areobserved, turn the vehicle off, wait15 seconds, and then turn it backon again to reset the system. If anyof these messages still appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC),the vehicle should be taken in forservice. For more information on theDIC messages, see Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑37.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.




The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control button is locatedon the instrument panel.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol button.

Traction control can be turned onby pressing and releasing thetraction control button and theappropriate TRACTION CONTROLON message will be displayed, if notautomatically shut off for any otherreason.

When the traction control systemis turned off, the appropriateTRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will be displayed onthe DIC. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” following for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a result ofthe brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spinis required. See If the Vehicle IsStuck on page 9‑11.

Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is partof the StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and byapplying the brakes as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activateand the StabiliTrak light will flashif it senses that any of the wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portionof traction control will work.




The engine speed management willbe disabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roadsor under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens,a reduction in acceleration maybe noticed, or a noise or vibrationmay be heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morecan be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.




The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorcomes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET– : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button to turn thecruise control system on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the SET–button located on the steeringwheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the+RES button on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed and stays there.




Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressT on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedis erased from memory bypressingT or if the ignitionis turned off.




Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) systemassists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumperare used to detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withURPA, always check behind thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.




Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑41 formore information.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑86.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message maynot clear until the frost or icehas melted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged.Take the vehicle to your dealerto repair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a rear visioncamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaypedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or any other object locatedoutside the cameras field of view,below the bumper, or under thevehicle.

Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen or byusing the screen during longer,higher speed backing maneuvers,or where there could becross-traffic. Perceived distancesmay be different from actualdistances.

(Continued)




WARNING (Continued)

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck before backing by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

Vehicles without NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the insiderear view mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rear view mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and holdz, locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off.The rear vision camera displayis now disabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andholdz until the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle.When the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse),the navigation screen will go backto the last screen that had beendisplayed, after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options,then press the MENU hard keyto select Display or touch theDisplay screen button.




3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen buttonis highlighted the RVC systemis on.

The delay received after shifting outof R (Reverse) is approximately10 seconds. The delay can becanceled by performing one ofthe following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety.”

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display.Any adjustments made will onlyaffect the rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrastof the screen.




Symbols

The navigation system may havea feature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled andthe symbols have been turned on,the Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑37.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard keyto enter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button willbe highlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.




The area displayed by the camerais limited and does not displayobjects that are close to eithercorner or under the bumper.The area displayed can varydepending on vehicle orientationor road conditions. The distanceof the image that appears on thescreen differs from the actualdistance.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.




. The back of the vehicle is inan accident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to havethe camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs theleft indicator light on the mirrorwill flash.. A slow flash may indicate a

loss of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate thatthe display has been on forthe maximum allowable timeduring a reverse cycle, or thedisplay has reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the videodevice from high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicatorwill stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.




FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance,we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heardwhen driving. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher as soon as possible.If heavy knocking is heard whenusing gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United Statesor CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑45 for additionalinformation.




California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑20. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to thefuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amountof additive required to meet U.S.

Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pumpto ensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.




Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area.We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines thatare not reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance.The malfunction indicator lampmight turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.




The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on youif you open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and waita few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑86.

When replacing the fuel cap,turn it clockwise until it clicks.Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can

determine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑20.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system.See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑20.




Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the fillingis complete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”




For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑83. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑83.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this section

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

have been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑54. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.With the added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.

. Consider using sway control.See Towing Equipment onpage 9‑56.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle, or otherparts could be damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.See “Tow/Haul Mode” later inthis section.




. Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer.

. The vehicle is designedprimarily as a passenger andload carrying vehicle. If a traileris towed, the vehicle will requiremore frequent maintenance dueto the additional load.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch partsand attachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailer

has electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. The purpose of the Tow/Haulmode is to:. Reduce the frequency and

improve the predictability oftransmission shifts.

. Provide the same solid shift feelas when the vehicle is unloaded.

. Improve control of vehicle speedwhile requiring less throttle pedalactivity.

. Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharginga battery installed in a trailer.




Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑29.

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that Tow/Haul modehas been selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, atwhich time the indicator light onthe instrument panel will turn off.The vehicle will automatically turnoff Tow/Haul every time it is started.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See Trailer Towing on page 9‑54.Tow/Haul is most useful whenpulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load under the followingdriving conditions:. Traveling through rolling terrain.. Traveling in stop and go traffic.. Traveling in busy parking lots

where improved low speedcontrol of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerwill not cause damage but there isno benefit. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.




Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting downa long or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hot andno longer work well. See “AutomaticEngine Grade Braking” withinTow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.




When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑18.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speed toaround 88 km/h (55 mph) to reducethe possibility of the engine and thetransmission overheating.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, butdo not shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal.Then apply the parking brakeand shift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.




Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs servicemore often when pulling a trailer.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem and brake system. Inspectthese before and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑18.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is inthe tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.




Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or advice.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any traileris an important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12




If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roadsare a few reasons why the righthitch is needed.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitchesor other bumper-type hitches toit. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,then be sure to seal the holeswhen the hitch is removed. If theholes are not sealed, dirt, water,and deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from the exhaust may getinto the vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.




Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches

A. Body-to-Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjustedso that the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system thatis adequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. Black: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Black: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*




*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected by yourdealer or a qualified service center.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the centerconsole near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too lightfor Tow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (non‐HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controllerare included with the vehicle aspart of the trailer wiring package.The instrument panel containsblunt cut wires behind the steeringcolumn for the electric trailer brakecontroller. The harness contains thefollowing wires:. Red/Black: Power Supply. White: Brake Switch Signal. Gray: Illumination. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer ora qualified service center.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36.



Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-26Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-28

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Electrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48



10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-78

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-83Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:



Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, andstability control. These accessoriesor modifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications orthe installation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications,is not covered under the terms ofthe vehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.



10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric andEnglish fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑18.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑15.



Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It islocated under the instrumentpanel on the driver side of thevehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pullup on the bottom center of thegrille, and push the secondaryhood release to the left.

3. After the lid has been partiallylifted, a gas strut automaticallylifts and holds the hood in thefully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close.Lower the hood until the liftingpressure of the strut is reduced.Then allow the hood to fall and latchinto place under its own weight.Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If the hood does not fullylatch, gently push the hood downat the front and center until it iscompletely latched.



10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview



Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑14.

B. Engine Coolant RecoveryCap. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑79.

D. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑32.

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑79.

F. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (under engine cover).See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑21.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (out ofview). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

J. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑23.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine Cover

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the engine cover (B) torelease it from the retainers.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.



10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life,careful attention must be paidto engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps willhelp protect your investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the Right EngineOil” in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑10.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accurate reading,the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.



Vehicle Care 10-9

Notice: Do not add too muchoil. Oil levels above or belowthe acceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the enginecould be damaged. You shoulddrain out the excess oil or limitdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to removethe excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark.This certification mark indicatesthat the oil has been approvedto the dexos1 specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check withyour dealer or service provideron whether the oil is approvedto the dexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.



10-10 Vehicle Care

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specificationor equivalent. See “Specification”for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos specification and displayingthe dexos certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all theoil from the filter before disposal.Never dispose of oil by puttingit in the trash or pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Recycle it bytaking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.



Vehicle Care 10-11

Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until “100%” is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.



10-12 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

The transmission fluid will notreach the end of the dipstick unlessthe transmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake the vehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑2 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (awayfrom vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains coveredwith dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Remove the engine cover.See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

A. Ventilation Tube

B. SensorInformation Provided by:


Vehicle Care 10-13

2. Disconnect the cover fitting fromthe ventilation tube (A).

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the sensor (B).

A. Clamp

B. Screws

C. Housing Cover

D. Filter

E. Base

4. Loosen the outlet ductclamp (A).

5. Loosen the six housingcover (C) screws (B).

6. Remove the housing cover (C)with outlet duct.

7. Remove the filter (D) and anyloose debris that may be foundin the base (E).

8. Inspect or replace the filter (D).

9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6to reinstall the housing coverand reconnect the electricalconnector to the sensor.

10. Reinstall the engine cover.See Engine Cover onpage 10‑7.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air;it helps to stop flames if theengine backfires. Use cautionwhen working on the engineand do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.



10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant inthe vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18.



Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used inthe vehicle's cooling system,the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 formore information.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.



10-16 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14 for more information.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD line marked on therecovery tank.

When the engine is hot, thelevel could be higher than theFULL COLD line. If the coolant isbelow the FULL COLD line whenthe engine is hot, there could bea leak in the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.



Vehicle Care 10-17

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tank

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

pressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Detach the fasteners and liftoff the panel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about onefull turn.

If a hiss is heard, wait for thatto stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.



10-18 Vehicle Care

5. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

6. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fans.

8. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through the fillerneck until the level is back up tothe base of the filler neck.

9. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure to secure it tightly.At any time during thisprocedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the filler neck,reinstall the pressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument panel cluster.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑15.

The vehicle may also displayan ENGINE OVERHEATEDIDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Engine CoolingSystem Messages on page 5‑33.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.



Vehicle Care 10-19

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑20 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badlyburned. Stop the engine if itoverheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑20 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.



10-20 Vehicle Care

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windowsas necessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral); otherwise,shift to the highest gear whiledriving—D (Drive) or L (Low).

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam,idle the engine for three minuteswhile parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safe placein an emergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage.In this mode, there is a significantloss in power and engineperformance. The temperaturegauge indicates an overheatcondition exists. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection modeshould be avoided.



Vehicle Care 10-21

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated under the engine cover onthe passenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover.See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should besomewhere between the MAXand MIN line on the dipstick inroom temperature. If the fluid ison or below the MIN line, addfluid close to the MAX Line.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.



10-22 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Washer FluidMessages on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution

to freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.



Vehicle Care 10-23

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applyingthe brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, havethe vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service mightbe required.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.



10-24 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct aleak. If fluid is added when thelinings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when new brake liningsare installed. Add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removingit. This helps keep dirt fromentering the reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluidin the brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash. Alwaysuse the proper brake fluid.



Vehicle Care 10-25

Notice. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, washit off immediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numberon the original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑79 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel DriveIt is not necessary to check theall–wheel drive lubricant levels.A fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to the dealer as soon aspossible.



10-26 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.



Vehicle Care 10-27

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper blade locksinto place.



10-28 Vehicle Care

For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑14.

Backglass Wiper Blade

To replace the backglass wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical positionso care should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper bladeassembly, hold the wiper armin position, and push the bladeaway from the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Windshield ReplacementThe vehicle is equipped withan acoustic windshield. If youever have to have the windshieldreplaced be sure to get an acousticwindshield so you will continueto have the benefits an acousticwindshield can provide.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to your dealerfor service.



Vehicle Care 10-29

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑30.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps

A. Taillamp

B. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑10.

2. Remove the black cuff fromthe lamp assembly by pullingrearward from the top tounfasten it from the snap tabs.



10-30 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the two hex nutsholding the taillamp assemblyin place.

4. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out to remove it.

6. Replace the bulb.

7. Reverse Steps 3 through 5 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.

When reinstalling the taillampassembly, the pin on the taillampassembly must line up andbe inserted correctly into theopening.

8. Replace the black cuff over thelamp assembly by pushing it intothe snap tabs.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the liftgatetrim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

License Plate Lamp 194LL

RearSidemarker Lamp 194LL

Rear Turn Signaland Taillamps

7443(W21/5W)

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.



Vehicle Care 10-31

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ WARNING

Exposure to high voltagecan cause shock, burns, andeven death. The high voltagecomponents in the vehicle canonly be serviced by technicianswith special training.

High voltage components areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these components.High voltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chanceof circuit overload and fire causedby electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before usingthe windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snowor ice, be sure to get it fixed.



10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to thefuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.



Vehicle Care 10-33

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningClutch

ABS MTRAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Motor

AFSAdaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

CIGARLIGHTER

Cigarette Lighter



10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

ECM Engine ControlModule

ECM 1Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

HORN Horn

HTD MIRHeated OutsideRearview Mirror

HUMIDITY/MAF

Humidity Sensor/MAF Sensor

HVAC BLWR

Heating,Ventilation andAir ConditioningBlower

Fuses Usage

LT HI BEAM Left High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LO BEAMLeft Low‐BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp andTurn Signal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGNPowertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET

Power Outlet

REARCAMERA

Rear VisionCamera

RR APORear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVACRear ClimateControl System

Fuses Usage

RT HI BEAM Right High‐BeamHeadlamp

RT LO BEAMRight Low‐BeamHeadlamp

RT PRKRightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp andTurn Signal

RVC SNSRRegulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE

Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

STOPLAMPS

(China Only)

Stoplamps(China Only)

STRTR Starter

TCMTransmissionControl Module



Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage

TRANS Transmission

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back‐upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSWWindshield Wiper/Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

CRNK Switched Power

Relays Usage

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAMHigh‐BeamHeadlamps

HID/LO BEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low‐BeamHeadlamps

HORN Horn

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp andTurn Signal Lamp

PRK LAMP Parking Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

Relays Usage

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp andTurn Signal Lamp

Stop Lamps(China Only)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HIWindshield WiperHigh Speed

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated under the instrument panelon the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the cover toaccess the fuse block.



10-36 Vehicle Care

Fuse Side

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbag

AMP Amplifier

BCK/UP/STOP

Back‐upLamp/Stoplamp

BCMBody ControlModule

CNSTR/VENT

Canister Vent

CTSY Courtesy Lamps

DR/LCK Door Locks

DRLDaytime RunningLamps

DRL 2/RR Fog

GMC HID Only(If Equipped)/Rear FogLamps-China Only

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOL SEAT

Heated/Cooling Seats

Fuses Usage

HVACHeating,Ventilation andAir Conditioning

INADV/PWR/LED

InadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

LT/TRN/SIGDriver Side TurnSignal

MSMMemory SeatModule

PDMPower Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWR MODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power Mirrors

RDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIGPassenger SideTurn Signal

SPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination



Vehicle Care 10-37

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT

Driver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDWPower WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSWRear WindowWasher Relay

UNLCKPower UnlockRelay

Relays Usage

DRL2Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay(If Equipped)

LT/UNLCKDriver Side UnlockRelay

DRLDaytime RunningLamps Relay(If Equipped)

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher Relay



10-38 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manualfor information regardingthe tire warranty and whereto get service. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout anda serious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenthe tires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.



Vehicle Care 10-39

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizeis a combination of lettersand numbers used to definea particular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Departmentof Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑56.



10-40 Vehicle Care

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑78 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑60.

(C) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows

the manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.



Vehicle Care 10-41

(F) Tire Size: A combinationof letters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.



10-42 Vehicle Care

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑45.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.



Vehicle Care 10-43

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.



10-44 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑53.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information systemthat provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑56.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.



Vehicle Care 10-45

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures.The recommended pressureis the minimum air pressureneeded to support the vehicle'smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more. Do not forget thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The compact spareshould be at 420 kPa (60 psi).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑78.



10-46 Vehicle Care

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)



Vehicle Care 10-47

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMSis not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑48 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.



10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly,if the vehicle has one. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed.For additional information anddetails about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 andTire Messages on page 5‑38.



Vehicle Care 10-49

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑45.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition butit does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑52, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑52 and Tires onpage 10‑38.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use onlythe GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑62 forinformation regarding the inflatorkit materials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.



10-50 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires.The malfunction light andthe DIC message should gooff after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The malfunction light andthe DIC message should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealerfor service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑54.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should gooff at the next ignition cycle.The sensors are matched to thetire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchasea relearn tool.



Vehicle Care 10-51

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at thesame time for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiveris in relearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the buttonto activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.



10-52 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km (7,500 mi).See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑2.

Tires are rotated to achievea uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires assoon as possible and check thewheel alignment. Also checkfor damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑53 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑58.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tiresto the recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.



Vehicle Care 10-53

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑48.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel changeor tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust build-up.Do not get grease on the flatwheel mounting surface oron the wheel nuts or bolts.

Check that the spare tire, ifthe vehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and thentry to rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeTire Changing on page 10‑69.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one wayto tell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑52 and TireRotation on page 10‑52 for moreinformation.



10-54 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed andmatched specific tires for thevehicle. The original equipmenttires installed were designedto meet General MotorsTire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the sameTPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑39 foradditional information.



Vehicle Care 10-55

GM recommends replacingall the tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on alltires will help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑52and Tire Rotation on page 10‑52for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that doesnot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑46.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicatesthe original equipment tires onthe vehicle. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.



10-56 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed bya GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑54 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 10‑3for additional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.



Vehicle Care 10-57

The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passengercars and light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In AdditionTo These Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and ahalf (1½) times as well onthe government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.



10-58 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The

temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.



Vehicle Care 10-59

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handlingof the vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑60 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To avoid vehicle damage, driveslow and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used,install them on the front tires.



10-60 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow out,especially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires on page 10‑38.If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But ifthere is ever a blowout, here are afew tips about what to expect andwhat to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction as

used in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soonas possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.



Vehicle Care 10-61

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall causing injury or death.Find a level place to change thetire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks onboth sides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a sparetire safely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑69. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑62.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.



10-62 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and youor others could be injured.Be sure to read and follow thetire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tireto its recommended pressure.Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit inits original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealantand compressor kit, there may notbe a spare tire and tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.



Vehicle Care 10-63

The kit includes: A. Selector Switch(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.

Replacement sealant canistersare available at your local dealer.See “Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant toseal one tire. After usage, thesealant canister and sealant/airhose assembly must be replaced.See “Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit toTemporarily Seal andInflate a Punctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.



10-64 Vehicle Care

When using the tire sealantand compressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑60 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑69.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 5‑10.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.



Vehicle Care 10-65

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off button (B)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be found

on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑45.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reachedafter approximately 25 minutes,the vehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

11. Press the on/off button (B)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12 through 18must be done immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the powerplug (H) back in their originallocation.



10-66 Vehicle Care

16. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location.Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damagedtire is repaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and thetire sealant cannot seal thetire. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico)on page 13‑10.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealinga tire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:



Vehicle Care 10-67

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑60 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑69.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) intothe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Power Outlets onpage 5‑10.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.



10-68 Vehicle Care

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑45.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjustthe excess pressure bypressing the pressure deflationbutton (D), if equipped, untilthe proper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (G) from the tirevalve stem by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in their originallocations.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.



Vehicle Care 10-69

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressorkit is located in the storagecompartment on the driver side,at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release thetire sealant and compressorkit strap.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing Tools

The tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side,at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling onthe latch tab, located towardthe rear of the vehicle, andpulling the cover off.



10-70 Vehicle Care

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket and remove thetool bag (A).

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

A. Jack

B. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,One-Piece Similar)

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and wrench (B).

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑78 for more information.

A. Rear Convenience Center

B. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,One-Piece Similar)

C. Carpet Cutout



Vehicle Care 10-71

D. Hoist Shaft

E. Compact Spare Tire

F. Retainer

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the conveniencecenter (A) that is nearest theliftgate.

2. Open the carpet cutout (C) thatis located through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the wrench (B) into thehoist shaft (D).

4. Turn the wrench (B)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (E) to the ground.Continue turning the wrenchuntil the spare tire can be pulledout from under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening toremove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.

Do not store a full‐size or aflat road tire under the vehicle.See “Storing the Spare Tire” and“Storing the Flat Tire” later in thissection.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑60 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the coveruntil it comes off. Be careful;the edges may be sharp. Do nottry to remove the cover with yourbare hands.

Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle untilyou have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.



10-72 Vehicle Care

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thewrench. For wheels with a wheellock key, use the wheel lockkey between the lock nut andwrench. The key is supplied inthe front passenger door pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheel nuts,the lock nut or wheel lock keycould be damaged. Do not usean impact wrench to remove thewheel nuts if this vehicle haswheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriatejacking location, find thetriangle (A) about 30.5 cm(12 in) from the front tire or (B)about 27 cm (10.5 in) from therear tire.

The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle's exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioningit correctly, the vehicle couldbe damaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Attach the wrench to the jack,and turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in).

6. Do not raise the vehicle yet.Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.



Vehicle Care 10-73

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise in the jack.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so that there isenough room for the spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling the rubberlatch. Store the plastic sparetire heat shield. See “Storing theSpare Tire” later in this sectionfor more information.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.



10-74 Vehicle Care

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning them clockwise untilthe wheel is held against themounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.

13. Lower the vehicle byattaching the wrench to thejack and turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

after replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.



Vehicle Care 10-75

Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored withthe valve stem pointing down.If the spare tire is stored withthe valve stem pointing upwards,the secondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened whenthe vehicle was being driven,the tire might contact a personor another vehicle, causing injuryand damage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tireis stored with the valve stempointing down.

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps whenchecking the air pressurein the compact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully againstthe underside of the vehicle.Continue turning the wrench untilyou feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compactspare tire is secure and thecable is tight. The spare tirehoist cannot be overtightened.



10-76 Vehicle Care

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), andthen try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the cable package fromthe jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valvestem pointing toward therear of the vehicle.

A. Cable

B. Liftgate Hinges

C. Spare Tire Heat Shield

D. Center of the Wheel

E. Door Striker

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center of thewheel (D), and the plastic sparetire heat shield (C), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other sideof the vehicle.



Vehicle Care 10-77

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Pushthe tube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

Put back all tools as theywere stored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Replace the tool bag (A).

3. Turn the jack (C) on its sideand place down on the holdingbracket.

4. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

5. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clipsare in the slots and push thecover closed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt‐on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full‐size tire, reinstall the bolt‐onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand‐tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the wrench.



10-78 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a timecould result in loss of brakingand handling. This could leadto a crash and you or otherscould be injured. Use only onecompact spare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to105 km/h (65 mph) for distances upto 5 000 km (3,000mi), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is bestto replace the spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. The sparetire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails.The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which candamage the tire, wheel, andother parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) systemwill be automatically disabledwhen you use the compact spare.To restore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD, replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.



Vehicle Care 10-79

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑25.

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damageto the vehicle that would notbe covered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehiclethat has a 12-volt system witha negative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission inNeutral before setting theparking brake. If one of thevehicles is a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on duringthe jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.



10-80 Vehicle Care

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a batterycan cause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not needto add water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosivegas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.



Vehicle Care 10-81

Do not connect positive (+)to negative (−) or you willget a short that would damagethe battery and maybe otherparts too. And do not connectthe negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries,it probably needs service.



10-82 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure thatthe cables do not touch eachother or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.



Vehicle Care 10-83

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two mostcommon types of recreationalvehicle towing are known as dinghytowing and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle withall four wheels on the ground.Dolly towing is towing the vehiclewith two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device knownas a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, makesure the vehicle is preparedto be towed.



10-84 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later inthis section.

If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannotbe towed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components. Reinstallthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to betowed, shift the transmission toP (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF.

2. Secure the vehicle to the towingvehicle.


4. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 15 ampECM fuse and the 50 ampBATT1 fuse from the underhoodfuse block and store in asafe location. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑32.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle istowed without performingeach of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph)is exceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.



Vehicle Care 10-85

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the fuses in theunderhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park), turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towingwith two different tire sizes onthe front of the vehicle cancause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles must notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).




10-86 Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.



Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish.See your dealer for approvedcleaning products.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use autoor chrome polish, steam, orcaustic soap to clean. A coatingof wax, rubbed to a high polish,is recommended for all brightmetal parts.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.



10-88 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap,and a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damagedif the vehicle is not washedafter driving on roads that havebeen sprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and waterafter exposure.

Notice: To avoid surfacedamage, do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Vehicle Care 10-89

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andthe steel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.



10-90 Vehicle Care

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices onthe instrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have productsfor cleaning the interior. Usecleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleanedto prevent permanent damage.

To prevent overspray, apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners,read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. Whilecleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by openingthe doors and windows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solutionwill leave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.



Vehicle Care 10-91

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleanerson automotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment.If a rotating brush attachment isbeing used during vacuuming,only use it on the floor carpet.

Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessaryto use a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastnessbefore using a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter.If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.



10-92 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened witha mild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers.Do not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanentlychange the appearance andfeel of leather or soft trimand are not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air freshenersmay cause permanent damageto plastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage causedby air fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Vehicle Care 10-93

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrongsize or is not properly installed, itcan interfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause acrash and injury. Make surethe floor mat does not interferewith the pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Button Retainer

Floor mats with a button-typeretainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat tounlock and remove.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the floor mat openingsover the carpet retainersand snapping into position.



10-94 Vehicle Care

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verifythat it does not interfere withthe pedals.

Knob Retainer

Floor mats with a knob retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Turn the knob until it is alignedwith the slot in the floor matgrommet.

2. Pull up on the floor mat.

3. Center the slot in the floor matgrommet with the knob on thefloor and set into position.

4. Turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot inthe grommet to lock the matin place.

5. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verifythat it does not interfere withthe pedals.



Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trainedtechnicians who can performrequired maintenance usinggenuine replacement parts.They have up‐to‐date tools andequipment for fast and accuratediagnostics. Many dealers haveextended evening and Saturdayhours, courtesy transportation,and online scheduling to assistwith service needs.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can leadto costly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommendedto have your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helpsto keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.Information Provided by:


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way peopleuse vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. There may needto be more frequent checksand services. The AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normalare for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑44.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are forvehicles that are:. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenancework can be dangerous and cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealerto have a trained technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

. Inspect the tires for wear.See Tire Inspection onpage 10‑52.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.




Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Tire Rotation andRequired Services Every12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑52.. Check engine oil level and

oil life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Check engine coolant level.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑14.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

. Visually inspect windshieldwiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑86. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑27.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑52.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

. Inspect brake system.




. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signsof wear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See SafetySystem Check on page 3‑22.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components.See Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑26.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function.See Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑26.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑27.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brakeand P (Park) Mechanism Checkon page 10‑27.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑62.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑22.







Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed ifthe vehicle is driven in areas withheavy traffic, areas with poor airquality, or areas with high dustlevels. Replacement may also beneeded if there is a reduction in airflow, excessive window fogging,or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.







Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricatechassis components every5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.




AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for itproperly may help to avoidfuture costly repairs. To maintainvehicle performance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also performa thorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the servicesand conditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure

to start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if

they squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacementwhen necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’ssystems and components.See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12for GM approved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels shouldbe checked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.




Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration,bounce/sway while braking,longer stopping distance,or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts forsigns of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulgeor split in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend theright tires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.




Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle lookinglike new, vehicle care productsare available from your dealer.For information on how to cleanand protect the vehicle’s interiorand exterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑90 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.




Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.




Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Carrier Assembly — Differential(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer

Case (Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W‐90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,in Canada 89021678).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).




Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C

Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 —

Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 —




Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed




DateOdometerReading





DateOdometerReading





DateOdometerReading




Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.



12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑12 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.



Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing



12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES



Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-16

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-21OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-22Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.



13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannotbe resolved by your dealershipwithout further help, in the U.S.,call 1-800-521-7300. In Canada,contact General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centreat 1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to givethe inquiry prompt attention.Have the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance representative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top leftof the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program priorto filing a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree withthe decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.




STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completedin approximately 70 days.

We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.




Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize thatdespite the good intentions of allparties involved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address

. Phone number

. Model year

. Brand

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Mileage

. Delivery date

. Description of the problem

. Dealership name

. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.




Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Buick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the localGeneral Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0818Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0818




Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0818

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0818

United States and Canada

1-800-521-7300

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who useText Telephones (TTYs), Buickhas TTY equipment available at itsCustomer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withBuick by dialing: 1-800-832-8425.TTY users in Canada can dial1‐800‐263-3830.




Online Owner Center

Buick Owner Center (U.S.)www.buickownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Buick dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links:

Buick — www.buick.com

Buick Merchandise —www.buickmerchandise.com

Help Center —http://www.buick.com/help/faqs.html. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected sectionof www.gm.ca where you cansave information on GM vehicles,get personalized offers, and usehandy tools and forms withgreater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.




GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.




Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow tothe nearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.




. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. Thereis a six request limit per year.Additional travel informationis also available. Allowthree weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot beprovided right away, theRoadside Assistance advisormay give permission to getlocal emergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicleis automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.The services are available at nocost under the terms and conditionsof the program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not partof, or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehiclelimited warranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving thevehicle within your city of residenceor on any passable road inMexico, the United States, andCanada. Services are subjectto the limitations described inthe following pages. Programcoverage varies by country.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice forthe vehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at theend of its term, contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Centerat 01-800-466-0818.




Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable

to change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedBuick dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers forBuick dealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow tothe nearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involvedin an accident during thecommission of a crime,administrative violation,or breach of traffic regulations,Roadside Assistance will notprovide service. When thevehicle is not accessible tobe towed, all maneuversrequired to access it will beat the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in anothercity outside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in costat the time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Buick dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.




. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling andit is not possible for the nearestBuick dealership to repair thevehicle the same day, requiringthe vehicle to stay at thedealership for a night or more.If this happens, in addition tothe previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you mustpay the difference at the timeof service.

Roadside Assistancewill coordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue yourtrip to the intended destinationor return to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for VehiclePick Up: Transportation to pickup your vehicle after repairsare complete. Once the dealerhas reported that the vehiclehas been repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated byyou to collect your vehicle atthe dealership's location if youor the designated person are notin the same town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not providedfor U.S. or Canada residents.All services provided in the U.S.and Canada are at the owner'sexpense and will be reimbursedby Roadside Assistance.




Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services forthe following:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization

situations due to a major forceor unforeseen circumstances,such as natural phenomenaof an extraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver ofthe vehicle or third parties.This means any occurrencethat causes physical injury tothe occupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived fromthe services provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Buick dealer that isnearest to the temporary storagefacility for the disabled vehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costsare not covered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance servicesare of no cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which arelisted previously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States

1-866-466-8197

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Buick reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.




Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requireswarranty service, contactyour dealer and request anappointment. By schedulinga service appointment andadvising the service consultantof your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for sameday-repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unableto wait, GM helps to minimizeinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, your dealercan offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.




Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof your dealer's shuttle service,the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicleor reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described hereinat its sole discretion.




Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipmentparts may also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total lossesin prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the historyof these parts is not known. Suchparts are not covered by the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany related failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts arenot covered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.




Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in theGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance,we recommend that you ensurethat the vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs with

Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, seeWhat Will You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑29.




Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towedthere. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collisionparts be original equipment parts,either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, youcan have control of the repair andparts choices as long as the coststays within reasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair informationon the engines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.




Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Make checks payablein U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.




However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaLimited. Call Transport Canadaat 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in asituation like this, please notifyGeneral Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7




Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.




GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owneror, if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crashor near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), orby pressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.




Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.




2 NOTES



OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

Overview

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.



14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identifythe vehicle location and canprovide critical information toemergency personnel. The Advisoris also trained to offer criticalassistance in emergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped withthese services. OnStar can unlockthe vehicle doors remotely, if itis equipped with automatic doorlocks, and can help police locatethe vehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.comfor coverage maps.

Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.



OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download:PushQ, then request the Advisorto download directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screento begin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go.For information about eNav,Destination Download,and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.



14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and receivedfrom the vehicle. The vehicle canalso be controlled from a cell phonethrough the OnStar mobile app. Seewww.onstar.com for coverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” andthe area code. Systemresponds: “OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds:“Call ended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.



OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device,an OnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle canbe remote started, if equipped,or the doors can be unlockedfrom anywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes,and major vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If a diagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, andan Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message tothe vehicle, requesting updatedaccount information.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles.Not all OnStar services areavailable everywhere or on allvehicles. For more information,a full description of OnStarservices, system limitations,and OnStar terms and conditions,see www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.



14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider forservice in that area, and thewireless service provider hascoverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar’s service.Service involving locationinformation about the vehiclecannot work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service maynot work. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehiclein a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacyin urgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle.The available dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, managesthe OnStar subscription, andallows viewing of videos of eachservice. Get subscription planpricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click onthe “My Account” tab on thehome page.



OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be promptedto change the PIN the first timewhen speaking with an Advisor.To change the OnStar PIN, callOnStar and provide the Advisorwith the current number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.



14-8 OnStar

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑58. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy ofany information sent via wirelesscellular communications cannotbe assured. Third parties mayunlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.



INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Airbag System (cont.)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator . . .5-18Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-25, 9-29AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-37

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24, 7-31

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38



i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-27Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Bulb Replacement (cont.)High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-19CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-27

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55, 3-57Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32



INDEX i-3

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 8-8

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-16Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5, 13-6Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-16Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-21Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8



i-4 INDEX

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-25, 9-29

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Engine (cont.)Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Cooling System Messages . . .5-33Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-21Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1



INDEX i-5

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-45Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-44Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Requirements, California . . . . .9-45System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-49Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8



i-6 INDEX

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAdaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Daytime RunningLamps/AutomaticHeadlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-32Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54



INDEX i-7

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Lights (cont.)Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-24Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-37Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35



i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont.)Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Object Detection System . . . . .5-36Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-31Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Navigation, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1



INDEX i-9

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8ParkShifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-22Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 8-8

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-50

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-38Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6Rearview MirrorAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4



i-10 INDEX

RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-23

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-20General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-23Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-20General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-14Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62



INDEX i-11

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Security, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Service (cont.)Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-14Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Sidemarker and StoplampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14StabiliTrakIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3



i-12 INDEX

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cargo Management System . . . 4-4Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Tires (cont.)Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-49Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-48Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-83Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83



INDEX i-13

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn Signal,Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-37Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-69

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-40



i-14 INDEX

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-27WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Wiring, High VoltageDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


Documents

2012 Buick Enclave Owner Manual Mcdn.dealereprocess.com/cdn/servicemanuals/buick/2012-enclave.pdf · Buick Enclave Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (3,1) Introduction iii The names,